50212035 Revit 2010 Imperial Tutorial | Autodesk Revit | Building Information Modeling

Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Add more detailed modelling elements. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and plumbing fixtures. such as mechanical equipment. and plumbing engineering workflows. electrical panels. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add basic MEP elements.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. fixtures. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and piping. Germany. 3 . What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. electrical. such as duct. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical.

Create detail views. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. When you install the training files as instructed. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. However. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Metric file names have an _m suffix. So. You do not design entire systems. and tags. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. to provide a richer and more finished design. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. you can choose to save your work. After completing each exercise. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Metric: files for users working with metric units. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . When you open a training file. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. In this exercise. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. templates. such as templates and families. when you add ductwork. Contact your CAD manager for more information. On the Contents tab. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. is located and accessed in the training files location. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. as well as how to open and save them. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. For example. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. you learn where the training files are located. views. Create schedules. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. and sheets to document the project. however. annotations. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. your Training folder may be in a different location. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. For example. NOTE Depending on your installation.

A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. if you open settings. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Accessing Training Files | 5 . a list of file types displays. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.rvt. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. select the folder in which to save the new file. double-click Imperial or Metric. 4 Click the training file name. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. 3 In the right pane. and click Open. and click Save. For File name. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and you can open any supported file type. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. scroll down. 8 If you have made changes.rvt) is selected. For Files of type. click ➤ Save As. enter the new file name. and click the Training Files icon.rvt and make changes. verify that Project Files (*. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. you are prompted to save the changes. For example. You may close the file with or without saving changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. the Open dialog displays.

6 .

If you move the partition. drawing sheets. quantities.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. In this case. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. scope. hence. schedules. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and phases when you need it. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. every drawing sheet. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. You learn the terminology. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the parameter is one of association or connection. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and schedules required for a building project. In the Revit MEP model. the operation of the software is parametric. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. 2D and 3D view. the hierarchy of elements. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. If the length of the elevation is changed. ■ ■ 7 . drawings. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. sections. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and plans. In mathematics and mechanical CAD.

tags. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Examples include detail lines. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. boilers. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and keynotes are annotation elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ducts. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and electrical panels. dimensions. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and reference planes are datum elements. They display in relevant views of the design. For example. walls and ceilings are hosts. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. sprinklers. Datum elements help to define project context. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and 2D detail components. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. levels. sprinklers. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. ducts. dimensions. and electrical panels. tags. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. sinks. filled regions. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. boilers. For example. For example. For example. They help to describe or document the design. When you change something. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. sinks. grids.

Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you can explicitly control them. In Revit MEP. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. and drawings of the design. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP. By using a single project file. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. you must be in a section or elevation view. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. for example. or bottom of foundation. section views. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Often. However. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. families. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. floors. To place levels. such as roofs. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. from geometry to construction data. first floor. This information includes components used to design the model. you do nothing to establish these relationships. North . and so forth).This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . programming is not required. For example. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Most often. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. If you can draw. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. and ceilings. elevation views. views of the project. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. In other cases. top of wall. schedules. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. The project file contains all information for the building design. and types. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views.

You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. or layer the views to see only the one on top. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. and similar graphical representation. each in-place family contains only a single type. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. and wires. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. For example. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. However. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Then experiment with them. A type can also be a style. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. System families include ducts. showing. For example. pipes. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. hiding. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . identical use. You can also display several project views at one time. Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family. System families can be transferred between projects. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. With a few clicks. such as a 30” X 42” title block. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Unlike system and standard component families.

Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To return the panel to the ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often.

tools used for managing and modifying the current view. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and settings. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. then select what you want to modify. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.. tools used for editing existing elements.. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and for switching views. and CAD files. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. architect-specific tools. When working on the Modify tab. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select the tool first. tools used for running analysis on the current design. project and system parameters. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. data and systems.

provides access to common tools. displays frequently used tools. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. For example. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. To keep a panel expanded. when adding duct. provides requested information. closes the application menu (double-click). The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. By default.

such as Export and Publish. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Export) On the application menu.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a template and create a new drawing. (Open) save the current drawing. click. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a file to open.. (Save As) export the current drawing.

annotation. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. family. saves a current project. (Licensing) close the file. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. publish the current project. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.On the application menu.. but is not enabled by default.. annotation. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. To enable or disable a tool item. family. provides views including Default 3D.. or template file.. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . click. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. and Walkthrough. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Print) access product and license information. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. Camera. or template file. to.

Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Clear the Status Bar check mark. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Clipboard. or the Family Editor. This displays the command history in a list. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. To hide the Status Bar. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. To show the Status Bar again. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. check the Status Bar. Modify. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Starting with the most recent command. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. repeat the command. Group. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. displaying the same information. workshared components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. In addition. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. when you switch to another editing mode. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. When you are using a command. However. When you are highlighting an element or component. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar.To undo or redo a series of operations. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures).

Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. To change existing elements to a different type. When you place an element in a drawing. Place a Wall. for example. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. click (Modify).To cancel or exit the current command. On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type.

Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. For example. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. In the following steps.rvt. 1 Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. There are several ways to access zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. After you are familiar with these tasks. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu.

9 To display SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). on the Navigation bar. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. this is referred to as a crossing selection. the view zooms in on the selected area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. When you release the mouse button. NOTE As you zoom in and out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 6 Click in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Modifying the View | 19 .NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. click . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. In the drawing area.

click the SteeringWheels tab. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Click and drag to orbit the design. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. ➤ Options. moving the wheel to the desired location. As you move the mouse. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. For more information about SteeringWheels.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. To define settings for SteeringWheels. press ESC. and click tin the Options dialog. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.

Performing Common Tasks | 21 .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. display along the ends. as shown. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.Design. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Similar controls. These are the drag controls. Small blue dots. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 2 Enter ZR. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select the duct. referred to as shape handles. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. bottoms.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Level 2 .HVAC Plan . called drag controls.

3 Click and drag the bottom control. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). In this example. on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. click the Undo command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. or press CTRL+Z. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select the first item in the list. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

such as Move and Copy. click to specify the starting position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. The duct is moved to the new position. for example. and drag it to the left as shown. and click again to specify the ending position. In this case. 10 Move the cursor to the right. require 2 clicks to complete the command. as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. you want to move the duct. 11 With the duct already selected. After selecting the element to move. Some commands.

Click OK. 14 Enter VG. For example. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 13 To end a command. Press ESC twice.Return.Supply. Select Mechanical . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. such as the Modify Ducts command.End a command Some commands. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. use copy/monitor. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can either select a template from the template library. You can choose from several templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and click Open. New projects inherit all the families. select Project. In that case. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. Finally. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 27 . under Template file.rte template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. the default building levels and standard views.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. link files. and loadable families. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. 6 Click OK. such as ducts and pipes. and modify system settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Create new. settings. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. click Training files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as the default project units and settings. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. such as coordination review and interference checking. system families. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 5 In the New Project dialog. create and manage views. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and geometry from the starting template. you learn how to start a project from a template. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.

Click OK. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. (Browse). ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. click Browse. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. NH. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. For Location. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. If you want to use a template other than the default. For example. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Click Cancel. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Click OK twice. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. navigate to Imperial Templates. review the construction materials listed. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. In the Choose Template dialog. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select Project template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. for City.7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the drawing area. click Edit. you can select it now. and open North. for Energy Data. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ For Building Construction. select Level 1. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. ■ ■ Under Create new. 10 Using the same method. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. select Manchester. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 9 Close the file with or without saving it. create another new project using the Construction template. under Energy Analysis. select School or University.rte template and click Open. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click (Browse). When you select the material. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file.

power distribution systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 4 1/2". Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. piping. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. under Duct Settings. click Wiring. click Rectangular. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . After standard settings have been established for an organization. 11 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. and 5 1/2". under Pipe Settings. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 22 In the right pane. and demand factors for electrical systems. 27 Click OK. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 10 1/2". 25 In the left pane. Click OK twice. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Holding CTRL.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and fire protection systems. for 3 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. select Identity Data. for 3/4". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. For Categories. 26 In the right pane. plumbing. wiring. 5 1/2". ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Duct Settings. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.rfa and click Open. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click Sizes. 33 Click OK. 4 1/2". for 3 1/2". 23 In the left pane. click Round. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 24 In the right pane. and 12 1/2". select Views. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.

Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. For Then by. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. families. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. under Create new. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. In addition.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select Family and Type. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. click Browse. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. select Project. From the Positioning list. select Associated Level. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Click Open. Linking Projects In this exercise. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 5 Click OK. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . sheets. click Training. select Auto . you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. To enable this coordination. and groups that are contained in a project. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 4 In the New Project dialog. Select Ascending Click OK twice. You need to create the MEP model for the project. select Sub-Discipline. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select View Name.rvt. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 38 Close the file. under Template file. For Sort by.Origin to Origin. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and select it as the library path. click the My Library icon. 15 Under Library Name. click (Add Value). ➤ Open. Load. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and change the name to My Library. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click My Library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click OK twice. templates. and click Open. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog.11 In the Places dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and click (Browse). Save. or families. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and Import dialogs.

scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. view the current path. 9 In the text editor. such as bump maps. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 19 Click Cancel. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. custom color files. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. select Ignore words in uppercase. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. This path is determined during installation. If you want to relocate this path. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. specify the new location here. 11 In the Options dialog. 23 Click 24 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 22 Select My Library. 20 Click ➤ Options. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 27 Click OK. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 2 In the Options dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 5 In the text editor. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 14 Click in the drawing area. 21 On the File Locations tab. click OK. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and decal image files. click Edit. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Spelling tab. 3 Under Settings. enter sheetmtl-Cu. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Places. If you work in a large office.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 12 Create a new project using the default template. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.

Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click File menu ➤ Save. click OK.. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you modify snap increments. In this exercise. click the Spelling tab. 25 Close the file without saving it. under Template file. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 4 In the New Project dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. 23 In the text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. 19 In the Options dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. under Dimension Snaps. 20 Under Settings. and enter 1 . click Close. click Restore Defaults.rte. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. You can turn snap settings on and off. you modify snap settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. work with snapping turned off. 21 Under Personal dictionary. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Training Files. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 22 In the text editor. click Edit. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.

While sketching. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click OK.7 Under Object Snaps. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. If it does not. For example. If you do not have a wheel button. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. zoom out until it does so. such as ZO to zoom out. snapping reverts to the system default settings. deselect Chain. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . use the wheel button on your mouse. This is the increment that you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. TIP To zoom while sketching. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. enter SM.

If you move the cursor along the wall.. Notice that snapping is once again active. 25 Click OK. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. 22 Move the cursor downward. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and the wall edges. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Do not set the wall end point. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . with or without saving it. and delete the value 1’ . 26 Close the file. and specify the wall endpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. it will snap to the endpoints. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 19 Enter SM. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. the midpoint.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 Under Dimension Snaps.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing.autodesk. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. In this exercise. and then you create a plenum level.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. In this lesson. By following the recommended workflow. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you can choose to save your work. However. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you design a mechanical system for an office building. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. If the tutorial training files are not present. This system consists of a cooling tower. 45 . To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. methodology. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. water source heat pump (WSHP). you will understand the process. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After finishing each exercise. you first configure the linked architectural model. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. After applying a color scheme to the zones. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. At the end of the tutorial. you first plan the system. As you create the mechanical system. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. duct system and a hydronic piping system. go to http://www.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to select it.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. roof. click Training Files. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. Next. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and after the linked model highlights. indicating that it’s the active view. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 1 In the Project Browser. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. In this section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ceilings. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. NOTE When working with a linked file. select Room Bounding. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.Space Plan is highlighted. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. under Constraints. and click OK. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. not in the MEP training file. you add a level for plenums. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Click Plan View Types. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and click OK. 16 Press Esc. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 9 On the Draw panel. and double-click West . Verify that Make Plan View is selected. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. The new level is placed. For Offset. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and enter Level 2 Plenum. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Preparing Spaces | 47 . click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).6 In the Project Browser. enter 8'.MEP. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views.

Plenum. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Under Extents. for Default View Template. and for Offset. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. for Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. you can choose to save your work. In the next exercise. For Cut plane. NOTE After finishing each exercise. for View Scale. and click Apply Default View Template. In this exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Under View Depth. select Level Above (Level 3). 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place spaces in areas of the building model. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. enter an Offset of 1' 0". For View Classification. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. However. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. select Design. for View Range. and then place spaces in various types of areas. Under Identity Data.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. enter 0. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. and click Properties. In this exercise. select Plenum Plan. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. right-click Level 2 Plenum. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. 20 In the Project Browser. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. For Sub-Discipline. select MEP . click Edit. ■ Click OK twice. for Top.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays.

Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. For Offset. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted. select Horizontal. For Upper Limit. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select Level 2 Plenum. For (Tag Location).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and ceilings). For Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. walls. select New. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. enter 0. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. Placing Spaces | 49 . This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.7 Click to place the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK. enter 219. for Number. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Name. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 9 Select the space. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ensuring coordination between the files. enter Library. 14 In the drawing area.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection.

For Offset. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Upper Limit. and then click Modify. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Placing Spaces | 51 . 21 Using the method learned previously. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. enter 0.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.

25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. and then split the space using a space separation line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. you place a space in a large corridor area.

for Upper Limit. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. and then press Esc. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. and for Offset. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. select Level 3.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. which was numbered 219Q. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 11 Close the schedule view.7 In the Project Browser. and scroll to the newly placed space. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . change the space number to 216A. as shown. 9 In the floor plan. enter Corridor. double-click the space name. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 10 Using the same method. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and press Enter. In the schedule. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. the plan view would have updated with the changes. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 18 Close the file with or without saving it.15 Press Esc twice. 16 Using the method learned previously. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click Training Files. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. If necessary. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place a space in a chase. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted.

and then click OK. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. For Number. On the Options Bar. select the space. for Upper Limit. select Level 3. 12 Click in the section view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. Under Identity Data. select Roof Level. for Name. and click Element Properties. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. In the plan view. select Interior and Reference. enter 4'. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Limit Offset. 8 Enter WT to tile the views.4 Press Esc. enter 0. 6 Enter VG. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. For Offset. enter 225PC. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click in the chase area to place the space. expand Spaces. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. for Upper Limit. 10 In the plan view. right-click. enter Chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .

select Space Tag With Volume. ceilings. floors. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 15 Press Esc. and maximize the view. In the next exercises. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Bounding elements (such as walls. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. All spaces in the view are tagged. 17 Type ZF. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.Space Plan. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. under Loaded Tags. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click OK. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.

The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. click Reference. which removes the space from the Default zone. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. After a space is placed in an area. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . under Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. To display space reference lines.rvt. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). you view and verify zones in the System Browser. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Training Files. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. click View ➤ Zones. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.

and modify the zone properties. click Training Files. As you do this. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 4 In the drawing area. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that the space is occupiable. and a new zone is created. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The new zone is listed in the System Browser.rvt. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. click Reference. double-click 121 Cafeteria. To display space reference lines. the Edit Zone tab displays. Instruction 221. you can add or remove a space from the zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. The graphic in the System Browser updates.5 In the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and verify the zones in the System Browser. select Occupiable. and Electrical 220 spaces. you assign spaces to a zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and click OK. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Computer Lab 222. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Using the Edit Zone tab. under Energy Analysis. The Zone tool is active. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Finish Editing Zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .In the System Browser. Click OK. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Expand HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction. 5 With the drawing area active. type VG. To view the zone in the drawing area. select HVAC Zones.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. and verify the zone in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Zoning. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 9 In the System Browser. click Training Files. To display space reference lines. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Close the System Browser. for Name. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Finish Editing Zone. and click OK. under Spaces. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.West . under Identity Data. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). You activated zone visibility in the views. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.Zoning is highlighted.Area B. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.West . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . enter 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. expand 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Reference.rvt. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.

zoom out. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click in the Level 2 . Select Attached End. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2".Zoning view to activate it. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning floor plan. 8 In the Level 1 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc.Zoning view. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.5 Click in the Level 1 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.

double-click Level 1 . space. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and zone information. click Training Files. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. on the ViewCube.Zoning view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name Value. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.rvt. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click the zone tag. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .Zoning to make it the active view. click the corner where the Top. enter Lounge . you verify the building. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.East. Front. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.

Click (Highlight). 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. Next. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. and select 109 Lounge. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you isolate the space. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. With 109 Lounge selected. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. click (Isolate). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. Using the Highlight tool. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). verify that Wireframe is selected. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them.

you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. and click OK. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. Below the list of spaces and zones. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . All spaces in the zone display in isolation. select Lounge/Recreation. select 109 Lounge. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and then click OK. Next. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. the space information displays for the selected space. For Electrical Loads. select 1_South_Lounge. verify that <Building> is selected. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.■ On the Details tab. ■ ■ ■ Next. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and then click OK. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. scroll down in the left pane. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For People. For Construction Type. and in the People dialog. click . click .

13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. floors.00 °F : N/A is specified. For Heating Information. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. This indicates the cooling set point. outdoor air per area. and humidification set point. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and other room-bounding components. This indicates the heating set point. roofs. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. cooling air temperature. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. heating air temperature. the zone information displays for the selected zone.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. Next. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and dehumidification set point. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.00 °F : 90. and air changes per hour.00 °F : N/A is specified. For Cooling Information. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that 70.00 °F : 54. click (Shading). This indicates the outdoor air per person. verify that 74. verify that <Building> is selected. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.

select Plenum. enter 0. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Under Energy Analysis. select Level 3. For Name.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Click OK.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). For Offset. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 212P. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Under Energy Analysis. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Because this is an unoccupied space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. open MEP . for Number. click Cancel. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Plenum. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.

and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ .rvt. click Edit. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. NH. for City. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and select space Plenum 212P. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. for Energy Data. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. click in the Value field. For Location. In this exercise. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. select School or University. space. and verify that the space has replaced the void. double-click Level 2 . under Energy Analysis. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and zone information. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. enter 03101. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Manchester. On the Place tab. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Postal Code. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. you verified building. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. click Training Files. is selected.Space Plan.

select Library . for Values. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and then click .When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. this option adjusts the times automatically. enter 200 Btu/h. For Space Type. For Condition Type. and click Element Properties. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. click Edit. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . both. ft. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). select Heated and cooled. for Values. verify that Level 1 is selected. Select Area per person. for Building Service. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Export Complexity. verify that Occupiable is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). click in the Value column. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. select space Library 219. you need to select this option. In order to select a space. ■ On the Weather tab. Click OK twice. For Ground Plane. For Project Phase.Audio Visual. For Sliver Space Tolerance. under Volume Computations. verify that 1' 0" is specified. a cooling load. or neither. and click OK. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK. select Specified. For Building Construction. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and enter 50 sq. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Sensible. 8 In the drawing area. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Latent. verify that <Building> is specified. right-click. and click OK. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For People. enter 150 Btu/h. If. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Specified.

Next. For Electrical Loads. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. verify that School or University is selected. There should be no warnings displayed. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click Calculate. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. select Actual. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and can be modified here. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . select Actual. For Building Service. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. You have verified the building information. NH. verify that <Building> is specified.■ ■ ■ Click OK. select 219 Library. For Location. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Select the space associated with the warning. and click to learn the cause for the warning. for Values. 12 Click the Details tab. Under Power. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click OK. click Information). For Building Construction. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. is specified. You should correct the space error in the building model. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and under Heating Information. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Click OK twice. for Values. verify that Manchester. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. click Edit.

weather. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or make any changes to the model. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. select HVAC Zones.Space Plan. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 3 In the drawing area. and a loads report displays. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 15 Review the loads report for project. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. indicating that it’s the active view. and zone information for the building model. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. space. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 19 In the drawing area. space.rvt. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. or zone information. In this exercise. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. For Color Scheme. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 16 After you review the loads report. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Click OK. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. click Training Files. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 21 Click OK. 17 In the loads report. under Energy Analysis. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. select 219 Library.

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.5 Zoom in to the legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. and click OK. in 1-ton increments. select the color scheme legend. The new scheme displays in the view. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. under Schemes. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select Tonnage Range.

11 Using the method learned previously. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. For Phase. more category options are available. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Select Schedule building components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Spaces. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Spaces.Space Fill is the active view. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. for Select available fields from. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.rvt. enter Space Airflow Schedule. click Training Files. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. select New Construction.12 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the next exercise.

and Blank line. and click OK.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. enter . In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Fields. Select Ascending. In the Calculated Value dialog. and then click Conditional Format. Header. In the Fields dialog. select HVAC. and then click . Select Formula. enter Airflow Delta. select Air Flow.■ Under Available fields. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Then by. For Discipline. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Not Between. For Formula. select Level. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Airflow Delta. For Type. select Calculated Supply Airflow. and then select Hidden field. select Number. click (Browse). Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. for Formula. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. ■ The schedule displays. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In this exercise. right-click to access schedule properties. Click OK twice. In later exercises. verify that Show is highlighted. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. In the next lesson. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. select red. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. For Background Color. Under Conditions to Use. click the color swatch. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . a view opens that contains the selected space. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.■ ■ ■ For Value. and click OK. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Color dialog. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range.

78 .

you will create supply air systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). After completing the air systems lesson. Then. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After system creation. In this lesson. As you place the air terminals. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. 79 . Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you modify air terminal parameters.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 In the ceiling view. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. click Training Files.rvt. and scroll to space 223. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and press Enter. and then press Esc to end the command. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Also. for Flow.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . and then select both Copy and Multiple.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and select Supply Diffuser . NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. type 12. and press Enter. If the host element is modified or moved. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 15 On the Options Bar. which in this case is the ceiling grid. enter 425 CFM. click Place on Face.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. verify that Constrain is cleared. select the diffuser. the hosted elements are updated as well. 17 Move the cursor down. 9 On the Placement panel. as shown.Rectangular Face Round Neck .

notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 29 Place 2 diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select one of the diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. As you place the return diffusers. Next. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.rfa. and then press Esc. 25 In the drawing area. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab. click Yes. and click Open. 22 In the drawing area. 27 Select Return Diffuser . If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 24 In the Open dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 21 On the Options Bar. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. as shown. clear Leader. click Place on Face.

and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. Level. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. click Yes. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select one of the return diffusers. and click to select the lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. as shown. select Strong Reference. for Reference. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Project Browser. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

For the start point. click the Level 1 line. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. enter 9' 0"2750. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. ■ ■ For the end point. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. and click OK. for Constraints ➤ Offset. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References.

you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click View ➤ Systems. However. You then create the logical connection between the system components. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design is highlighted.Press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. right-click the title. including energy analysis. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. the space crossing lines display. After creating the logical connection. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. When you highlight a space.rvt. In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i.

9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and Flow value. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. As you add diffusers to systems. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 12 In the System Browser. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. On the Options Bar. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. the number of elements is updated. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 In the drawing area. Connect Into. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 15 Click Cancel. review the Number of Elements. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. System Name. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog.17 Using the method learned previously. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. under Mechanical. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 22 Click OK. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for System Name. Rename the system Next. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. In this exercise. under Identity Data. which updates the name in the System Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the air terminals are the children. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. In this exercise. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. for Mark. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. and the system connects them. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 25 Click OK. 18 Click OK.

A Generate Layout tab displays. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). the space crossing lines display. 4 In the drawing area. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. In this case. 5 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. for Solution Type. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. which provides various layout tools. select the upper left diffuser. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the Network type provides several solutions. and display solution 1.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Also.HVAC Plan. click Training Files. select Network. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.

enter 3'. click Settings. enter 9' 10 1/2".7 On the Options Bar. Click OK. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. For Duct Type. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. For Duct Type. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 9' 10 1/2". click Modify.Round. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Flex Duct Type. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Select Branch. you’ll get an error in a later step. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct.

For example. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.11 Click Finish Layout. as is the elbow itself. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. or manually modify the duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components.

15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and then click OK. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. under Graphics. The first time you press Tab. Usually. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. thus it is not part of the system. select Duct Color Fill . If the entire network does not highlight. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. and equipment. Using a flow-based color scheme. fittings. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab.Flow. for Color Scheme. but not all values are used in this view. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click OK. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select By View. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. for Values Displayed. a disconnection exists. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and click to select it. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.

for Schemes. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and press Enter. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select Duct Color Fill . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. under Mechanical . note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the color scheme legend. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 26 Click OK. select one of the diffusers in the system. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 20 In the drawing area. for Flow. select the WSHP.Velocity.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.Airflow. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

select Friction. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and then click to select it. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.08 in-wg/100ft. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and select 16". 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Click OK. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Select the upper segment of main duct.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. highlight a segment of the duct. Select Only. Under Constraints. click Cancel. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Restrict Height. select Calculated Size Only. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Branch Sizing. and enter . The ductwork and fittings are updated. and drag it to the right.

Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). and pressure loss.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Use the information that displays (flow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . static pressure. pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Using this tool. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.

rvt. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. also known as the critical path. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 35 Click Finish.NOTE As you inspect a system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.

3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select the WSHP. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to specify the end of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click Draw Duct.

The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select 9' 10 1/2". double-click MEP . click the corner where the Top. for Offset. right-click the connector grip.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . NOTE When drawing duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .3D MEP. Front. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 In the Project Browser. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 15 On the ViewCube. and click Draw Duct. 11 On the Options Bar.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select the top right diffuser. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.

The ductwork is automatically created. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Also. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 19 In the drawing area.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. it is considered a closed loop. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 22 Using the same method. in space 115. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.

and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 25 Press Esc. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.

28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 30 Press Esc twice. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. and then click Modify. and click to select it. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split.

verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 40 Using the same method. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Airflow. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. under Constraints. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and then click OK. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height. such as a plenum. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. for Flow.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select a segment of the main duct. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical .

including 2 base mounted pumps. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Create return and supply piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. In this lesson. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. 109 . using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Then. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you place mechanical equipment. on level 3 of the building model. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.rvt. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.HVAC Plan . in corridor 328. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 7 On the Options Bar.Horizontal .Design is highlighted. and select WSHP . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.2-6 Tons .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Wall faces is selected. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.High Efficiency . as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Left Return . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.

and enter 2'.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. click the dimension. as shown. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to place the dimension. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 10 Select the WSHP. and in the Type Selector. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. verify that the WSHP is still selected. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.8 Click the corridor wall face. click the top edge of the WSHP.

and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Under Mechanical. for Offset. Click OK. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and click to place it in the mechanical room.14 Click Modify. for Water Flow. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select the 2 WSHPs. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. as shown. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 9'. enter 12 GPM. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl.

and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you create the return and supply piping systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. including flow and pressure. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.21 Click Modify. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

and click View ➤ Piping.Design is highlighted. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.rvt. 5 In the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. where it is easier to review the information. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. but without a corresponding system. indicating that it’s the active view. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. click Training Files. Creating a Piping System | 115 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. You can create pipes to connect system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Mech 330). Unlike logical connections (systems).HVAC Plan . analyses cannot be performed. right-click the Systems column heading.

8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. for System Name. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. select the 2 WSHPs. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Assigning a system component to an existing system.In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. select the boiler. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. and the Edit System tool is not active. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Therefore. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. while pressing Ctrl. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. This display indicates that the system is selected. As you assign equipment to systems. Notice that on the Options Bar. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area.

Creating a Piping System | 117 . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. for System Name. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. double-click Roof . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and select the cooling tower.13 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You have created the hydronic return system. under Design ➤ HVAC . 19 In the Project Browser.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 17 On the Options Bar.Design.HVAC Plan .

IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 29 Right-click CHWS. and click OK. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. In heating mode. and bypasses the cooling tower. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. and click Expand All. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 28 Using the same method. expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click Select. the boiler supplies heated water to the system.22 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 23 Close the roof plan view. 25 Select the boiler. In cooling mode. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The hydronic supply system highlights in red. indicating the logical connection.

select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click OK.In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and click Column Settings. and click Properties. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. under Mechanical. enter 18 GPM. for Water Flow. expand Piping. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 32 In the System Browser. and click OK. including the flow rate and size of the component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. you can view several parameters. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool.

and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.HVAC Plan . click Check None.Mech 330). Notice that all components within the Level 3 . press Tab to highlight the system. and click OK. the boiler. you can place the cursor over a system component. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 9 In the Select a System dialog.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. indicating that it’s the active view. then the Select a System dialog displays. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.rvt. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. A system preview displays in red. 10 Click OK. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). select Mechanical Equipment. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design is highlighted. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. When you draw a box to select components. select CHWR. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to select it. 5 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .

The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Perimeter. verify that Solutions is selected. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. duct. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . click Settings. enter 1' 6''. 13 Click Cancel. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. or architectural components. structural beams. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. It does not reference the architecture. For Inset.11 On the Options Bar. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.

Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. the flow for one WSHP is 18. and the flow for the other is 12. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. With each Tab. 17 Optionally. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. to display the path with thinner lines.16 Click Finish Layout. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. and press Tab 3 times.

under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. 23 Under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 24 Press Esc. and click OK.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

you physically close the CHWR loop. Logically. which propagates flow throughout the system. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. On the Options Bar. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. Next. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. click Edit System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.HVAC Plan . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. the Number of Elements is now 8. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 28 In the Project Browser. 27 On the System Tools panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . 32 Click Finish Editing System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.Design. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.

under Mechanical. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and click Cancel. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. access its instance properties. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. as shown. 35 Using the drag control. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. select a WSHP. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 38 Using the same method.

40 In the Select a System dialog. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. select CHWS. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. and then click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Click Settings. enter 0''/12''. For Inset. 41 Click OK. For Slope. enter 1' 6''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset.

) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 46 Click Modify. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. (Both sections are at the same elevation. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 47 In the drawing area. In a later exercise.

The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.50 Using the same method. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Either relocate the system components. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. or offset elevations are incorrect. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 51 Click Finish Layout. To create the piping system. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select a different layout solution. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Add piping to close the supply loop. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or manually modify the pipe. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry.

double-click 3D HVAC Building. As you work in the training file. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.rvt. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. and the return pipes are magenta.HVAC Plan . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Design ➤ 3D Views.Design is highlighted. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

as shown. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . select the boiler. Click to specify the reference point.

select the return pipe riser. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 13 In the plan view. 12 In the 3D view. The connections are automatically created.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. select the boiler. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the lower one is secondary. and click OK. and click Draw Pipe. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.

enter 1' . and you select 1 connector. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. enter 2'. for Offset. and press Enter. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. ■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.7''. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping.In a plan view. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.

and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. select the primary base mounted pump. 18 Press Esc twice.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and select it. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. As you place piping runs that are close together. 19 In the plan view. as shown. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and click OK. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.

click to connect to the pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 29 If necessary. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and when the connector point displays.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click the minus symbol. you select the tee fitting. 27 Move the cursor to the right. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector. 28 Press Esc. and click to draw the pipe. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector. enter 4'. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. 33 Press Esc.

3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 35 Using the method learned previously.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. type 1'. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. enter 9' 6''. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. ■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.

right-click. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. for Cooling Water Flow. When you create the pumps in parallel. The flow is being propagated through the piping.50 or 50% of the Flow. and click Element Properties. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM).39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the plan view. 42 Click OK. 41 Using the same method. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Press Esc. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. Connect the cooling tower Next. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 46 Press Esc. 40 Click Cancel. view the properties for the secondary pump. right-click. 44 In the 3D view. as shown. select the cooling tower. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). the value is 0 GPM. under Mechanical. notice that under Mechanical. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. notice that Flow is 125 GPM.

49 Press Esc. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet). NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise. select the cooling tower. and close the dialog. When the valve is open. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).50 In the 3D View. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. the water bypasses the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler.rvt. click Training Files. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. and select Ball Valve .HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 Press Esc twice.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Valves | 143 . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.10 Press Esc.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. place another Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Select Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. 14 Using the same method.

right-click. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. In heating mode. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. 19 Using the same method. under Mechanical. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Adding Valves | 145 . and select Ball Valve .Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and click OK. 20 Select the bypass valve. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. as shown. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.22 Using the method you just learned. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Initially. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Size. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Sizing Pipe | 147 . for Schemes. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK.Flow. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK.

for Branch Sizing. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction. and click to select the branch. Under Constraints. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment).Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Select And. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and enter 2. enter 5 FPS.25 FT/100ft. 13 Press Esc. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and for Velocity. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. Inspecting the System In this exercise. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System | 149 . click Training Files. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Using the System Inspector. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. pressure. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . or offset elevations are incorrect.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.

An inspection flag reports the section number.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. as required. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. flow. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. This information helps you modify the system design.

89 psi. select 90° F. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. for Fluid Temperature.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.67 psi. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 9 Using the same method. targeting those systems that need attention. 10 Click Finish. inspect Section 6 again. In this exercise. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you need to validate them. and click OK.88 psi. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . as shown. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. and the Pressure Loss is 1.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and to size pipe. the Static Pressure is 7.

9 Right-click CHWS. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. After you have assigned all components to systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . In the System Browser. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. the pipe is associated with that system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. After you assign components to a system. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 4 In the System Browser. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files.Design. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for pipe sizing. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. thus assigning the components to a system. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. For example. and click Show to view all of the system components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 7 In the System Browser. As you learned when placing components. double-click Level 1 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. right-click the Systems titlebar. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . If you place components without assigning them to a system. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and double-click Level 3 .HVAC Plan . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Warnings display.Design. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and click View. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).

You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. otherwise. 10 Using the same methods. and select Level 3 . right-click Hydronic Return. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. expand the Unassigned folder. 13 Right-click CHWR. and click Expand All.HVAC Plan . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and confirm unassigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned.TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. click Close.Design floor plan. 12 In the System Browser. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 90. enter THHN. speeding up the design phase. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . You also add a wiring type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. distribution systems.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. ■ ■ For Factor. As you place components and create circuits. enter 1. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. wiring.rvt. For Temperature Rating. select Wiring Types. click (Open). Select Correction Factor.04. expand Wiring . select 75.Wire Sizes. click Training Files. select Copper. For Temperature. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Click OK. select Copper. For Material. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ ■ For Material. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. and demand factors that are applied in the design.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. select Red. for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click Background Color. Click OK three times. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.■ ■ For Value.

These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. 167 . Create power loads. First. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Use the System Browser to check your design. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. as you place lighting fixtures. Create a panel schedule. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Then.

4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. In the Color dialog. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.00 fc. select the color for Less Than 20. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.rvt.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. By using orange as the color for this range. You can create additional color schemes. Under Scheme Definition. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open).Lighting Color Fill view is open. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Orange. for the Spaces Category. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files.00 fc. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. select the color legend. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Average Estimated Illumination. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. for Basic Colors.

277. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.7 In the Project Browser. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .Lighting Ceiling plan. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.5 fc range. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 8 In the Project Browser.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc.5 fc range is satisfied.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The red field will clear once the +/. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. zoom to space Library 219. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 13 Click the Level 2 .

20 Select the lighting fixture. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 18 Click to place the fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the fixtures will move accordingly. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Press ESC to end the command. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. select Multiple. 23 Click OK. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.

select the 3 fixtures.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select Multiple. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 28 In the drawing area.

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog.277V. click Check None. Click OK. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . select Lighting Fixtures.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . select Multiple Alignment. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 42 In the drawing area. 41 On the Options Bar. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . The lighting delta is satisfied. Note the changes for the space Library 219.277V. click the ceiling grid line as shown.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

In the next exercise. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the light fixture IES files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.45 Press ESC to end the command. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. scroll to view space space Library 219. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Tile the views as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Lighting Color Fill plan. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Lighting Plan.

click the value for Initial Color. for Lamp. for Apparent Load. Click OK.93. click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Ballast Loss Factor. specify 15000. select T5 [HO]. Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. In the Select File dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. for Color Preset.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. enter 162. enter F15. for Type Mark. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . Under Electrical. Under Photometrics.85.00 VA. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. Under Photometrics.277V and click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Intensity. select Luminous Flux. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. and click OK. ■ Click Apply. Under Identity Data. In the Name dialog.ies and click Open. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. enter .00 lm. enter . select 463T5_S. select Xenon and click OK.

11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . click Check None. select Lighting Fixtures. Click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.277V. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. and for Category. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. 10 In the Filter dialog.

Press Delete. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Note the lighting delta updates again. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 15 In space Library 219. select the top center fixture.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and receptacles to your design.rvt. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. In the next exercise. Junction Boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open).Press Delete. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you add switches. Junction Boxes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Placing Switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Placing Switches. junction boxes. and Receptacles | 183 . 19 Close the file with or without saving it.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Click to place the switch. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .

NoLoad. Junction Boxes. Select Junction Boxes . The element type Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. and Receptacles | 185 . Placing Switches. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa and click Open.

14 Press ESC to end the command. 21 In the drawing area. Under Electrical. enter JB-1NL. enter 9’0”. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Number of Poles is 1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 15 Select the junction box.Offset. zoom to space Library 219. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Click OK twice. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. for Level 2 . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click Edit Type. for Mark. NOTE When entering values.

and Voltage. 24 For any column. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Name. and Receptacles | 187 . 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Expand Electrical.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. 23 In the System Browser. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. and Number of Elements. Click OK. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 26 In the System Browser. Select Load. Space Number. Expand General. Junction Boxes. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. right-click and click Column Settings. NOTE If necessary. Distribution System. Select Size. Placing Switches.

35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 31 Close the System Browser.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Placing Switches. 40 On the Options Bar. Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 .

and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 42 Move the cursor down. move the cursor along the wall.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

43 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 .

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

and work toward the higher voltage. click Training Files. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). zoom to the space Electrical 220. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rvt. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.equipment. Adding wiring to a project is optional. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

Loads. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 14 Select the panelboard. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. enter 20. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 480/277 Wye. select 120/208 Wye. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Press ESC to end the command. enter PP-2B. for Max. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. #1 Pole Breakers. For Panel Name. for Distribution System. 8 Select the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.Surface: 100A. 15 On the Options Bar.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

Loads.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . For Panel Name. 23 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. which is the logical connection between the elements. for Max. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Check None. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Click OK. enter LP-2B. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. zoom to space Instruction 221. 20 In the drawing area. enter 20. #1 Pole Breakers.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 33 Select the switch on the right.28 Press ESC to end the command. 32 Press ESC.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

Click OK. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. for Hot Conductors. click (Open). Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Next you create circuits without showing wire. select Wires. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. click Check None. except without wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .Loads. enter 2. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Category. 41 In the Filter dialog.

Voltage. expand Power. and then expand circuit 1. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 13 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. and verify that Load. Distribution System. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click on the Systems heading. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Rating. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 2 In the drawing area. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. click Training Files. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Expand Electrical. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 With the junction box still selected. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. Click OK. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 30 Close the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. under Electrical. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.

for Type Mark. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . click below the first one to place it. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Edit Type. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. under Identity Data. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Click Tags. 47 In the drawing area. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click OK twice. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Click Yes. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. enter FR4.

and for Category. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 56 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tags. and click Apply. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click OK. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Click OK. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Save. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left.rfa. Next you create a switch system. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. click Check None. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Break. 61 Close the file with or without saving it.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. for File Name. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . For Circuit Number. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 52 In the Save As dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Click OK. enter a comma. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. for Switch ID. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. enter a. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical Lighting. click (Open). 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click Training Files. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. Click OK. Creating a Switch System | 205 .

15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.Lighting. for switch ID. under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. enter b. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. lighting. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). and for Category. Circuits are used for power. click Training Files. Click OK. select Electrical Fixtures. 7 In space Electrical 220. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups).rvt. 4 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. and data systems. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. select the PP-2B panel.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Power Loads | 207 . The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.

under Electrical . select Wiring. 19 Click OK. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Element Properties.rfa. and in the right pane. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Click OK. 15 In the Load Family dialog. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. for Hot Conductors. and in the drawing area. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.Loads. enter 2. and click Open. 13 Select the wire again. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click to select the circuit.

add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. in space Instruction 221.26 Press Delete. 28 In the drawing area. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle.

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Finally. zoom to space Electrical 220. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. click Open. Next you balance the loads for your design. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Training Files. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. 3 In the Electrical space. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. select panel LP-2B. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

12 Select panel PP-2B. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Under Electrical-Loads. B. enter 30A.3616 VA). Scroll down. for Rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#10. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Phase B 3636 VA. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. and Phase C . 1-#12. 1-#10. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 1-#12. click Rebalance Loads. Click OK. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 6 Click OK. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.3712 VA.

20 Click OK to close the warning dialog.Loads. Click OK. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. enter 30A. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. click (Open).Loads. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. under Electrical . Next you create a panel schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating. under Electrical . The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. enter 25A. Select PP-2B. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Close the warning dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. and click OK. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. and click OK.rvt. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating.15 Select panel PP-2B.

5 In the Project Browser. under Other.Panel Schedules. 4 Close the report. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. and open E601 . enter 3/32. 11 Click OK twice. for Appearance. Under Body Text. expand Sheets (all). select Berlin Sans FB. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 7 Select the schedule. Under Header Text. for Font. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 1/8. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. click Edit. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. select Bold and Italic. for Font Size. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 In the Project Browser. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. for Font Size. Under Header Text. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click Training Files.

note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. select space Lounge 212. Expand Unassigned. each with a load of 180VA. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. press TAB once. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. In the System Browser. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. In the System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C.

expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 15 In the dialog. select MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Warnings. for Panel. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 16 Close the details dialog. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 17 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 On the Options Bar. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Electrical 214.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

In this lesson. Adding a pipe size. planning is critical to a successful design. and click Properties. in addition to loading existing families. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. and click OK.Design is open. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. 4 In the Name dialog.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 219 . click Duplicate.Sanitary. type PVC . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.rvt. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. 2 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. right-click PVC .Vent. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you create a PVC pipe type. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and verify that Level 1 .

and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . select Tee Reducing Double Vent . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 6 Click OK. enter 27/32''. 18 For System Type. 27 For the new pipe size. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. click Pipe Settings.rfa. select Sanitary.DWV: Standard. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.Sch 40 . select Sanitary. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 15 For System Type. select Tee Vent . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.DWV: Standard. click Training Files. and click OK.Sch 40 . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 26 Click OK. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the right pane. enter 5/8''. select Plastic. In the Project Browser. and click Main. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 10 On the Selection panel. for Material. 13 In the right panel.0''. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.PVC . enter -4' . click Modify. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. PVC .Vent is listed. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. under Mechanical. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.PVC . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. For Offset.PVC .Sch 40 . Tee. 24 For Inside Diameter. 17 In the left pane. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. Cross. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select Tee. under Pipe Types. enter 1/2''. Tap. select None. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Branch.DWV. for Nominal. 25 For Outside. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 22 Click New Size. enter 10°.

Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. 221 . Create the hot water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the cold water system. add a hot water heater. and hot and cold water piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. sanitary piping. including plumbing fixtures. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. including the men’s room (space Male 107).Design is open. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. click Training Files. 1 urinal. you add 2 toilets.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Plumbing Plan .

6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. select Public .Flush Valve . 5 On the Placement panel.Wall Mounted. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. against the left wall. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.1. 1 wall-mounted urinal. and 3 sinks. 4 On the Element panel.6 gpf. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. under Water Closet .The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. as shown. in the Type Selector. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .

under Urinal . 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.) 8 Press Esc. and press Esc. above the first in the standard toilet space. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. (Again. use the reference line to center the fixture. zoom in closer. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.Wall Hung. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.7 Click to place another toilet.

Rectangular.2'' Drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer . 12 On the Placement panel. click Place on Face.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. under Floor Drain . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 14 Click Modify. In placing the fixture.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and Default Domestic Cold Water. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. click Training Files. and a floor drain. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. a urinal. and click View ➤ Piping. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. In this exercise. right-click in the System Browser table heading. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and review the components listed under this system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).

and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . clear Lines (<Overhead>). 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design is open. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design ➤ Floor Plans. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 6 In the plan view.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 8 In the Filter dialog. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. so the Create Sanitary System is available. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 11 On the Options Bar. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. expand Sanitary.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Finish Editing System. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 12 On the Edit System panel. enter Sanitary 107. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 13 In the Systems Browser. for System Name. You include the bathroom space number in the name. If you deselected the drain.

a toilet. for example. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed. select Sanitary 107.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select one of the components in the system. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . and click OK. as shown. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

enter -1' 0''. select Intersections. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 23 For Offset.19 On the Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 26 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. and click OK. You accept this suggested solution. for Offset. 27 Click Modify. select 4''. 25 On the Options Bar. and click Settings. 21 On Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select Main. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Diameter. and for Offset. enter -4'-0”. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Slope. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 24 In the left pane. click Solutions. select Branch. for Solution Type. The default settings are automatically modified. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

use the ViewCube to orient the view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.30 In the 3D view. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 31 Click Modify.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

38 Close the file with or without saving it.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .

Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. select 22''x22'' . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Public. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Element panel. under Lavatory . as shown. 5 On the Placement panel. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. click Training Files. in the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.Rectangular. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. and verify that Level 1 . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Design is open.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan .

enter 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. select Multiple. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify. 8 Select the sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. For example. On the Options Bar. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. and press Enter to create a second sink. TIP When entering dimensions.

13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Press Esc. 15 Click the 3 sinks. click Add To System. 16 On the Edit System panel. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 In the drawing area. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Finish Editing System. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.

double-click 3D Plumbing. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. as shown. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view. with the tee fitting selected. 22 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. 21 Select the tee. 20 Select the fitting. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Apply. for Offset. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. for Slope. press Spacebar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 2' . enter 1/8'' / 12''. When you press the Spacebar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.6''. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. and click to draw the pipe. In this example.

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 30 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .Sch 40 .PVC . under Wye 45 Deg Double . move the cursor over the stub pipe. 31 Click Modify. and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting.DWV. 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard.

enter 1'. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you add pipe segments to the double wye. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right.33 With the fitting selected. 34 Press Esc. In the next steps. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. enter 6''. on the Options Bar. for Offset. zoom in to the double wye fitting. and click Draw Pipe. double-click the section head to open the section view. 37 Select the fitting. right-click the right connector. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. and press Enter.

40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. as shown. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 41 Using the same method. 42 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . and click to place the pipe. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 47 Move the cursor down. 49 Using the same method. and press Esc. press Spacebar. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and click Draw Pipe. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 46 In the section view. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 48 Click Modify. enter 6''. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. right-click the bottom connector.

place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select Standard. 55 In the 3D view. 52 In the plan view. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .DWV. 53 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 54 Click Modify. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. under Trap P .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select the P-Trap on the left.Sch 40 . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 51 In the Type Selector. 56 Using the same method.PVC . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.

Select the double wye pipe on the left. In the plan view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click Draw Pipe.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 58 Using the same method. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter. Move the cursor to the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click Modify. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click in the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. enter 6''.. select the left P-Trap.

select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select a proposed solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. On the Routing Solutions panel. click Finish to select the recommended solution. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Press Esc. as shown.■ In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew. select PVC Sanitary. In the Type Selector. while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types.

you continue with the work on the sanitary system. click Training Files. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected.rvt. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. click Finish. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. In the left pane of the Open dialog.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. and verify the slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. adjusting the sanitary stack. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. for Slope. 62 On the Options Bar. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 In the 3D view.DWV.Floor level line. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click Draw Pipe.Design. as shown. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and click to draw the pipe. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. select the elbow fitting on the right.Plumbing Plan . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Overall.Design. select the vertical stack.Sch 40 .PVC . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. right-click the top connector. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 3 In the Section view. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 7 On the Selection panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. select Standard. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 5 Select the tee.

DWV. 17 In the Type Selector.PVC . 15 Press Esc. 14 On the Options Bar.11 Click Modify. 13 Click the rotate control once. enter 1'-0”. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 18 In the plan view. as shown.Sch 40 . 12 Select the fitting. under Plug . for Offset. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Standard.

The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. click Training Files. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.19 Click Modify.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

17 In the Filter dialog.) 10 Click OK. select Main. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. draw a selection box to select the toilets. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and click OK. For Offset. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 9 In the left pane. minimize the Sanitary system. For Offset. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. enter 9' 3''.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Pipe Types: Water.Design ➤ 3D Views. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 15 In the plan view. select Plumbing Fixtures. for System Type. 14 In the System Browser. click Check None. double-click 3D Plumbing . These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 4 In the right pane. select Branch. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and sinks. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Domestic Hot Water. select Domestic Hot Water. select Branch. and click Main. and for System Type. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. expand Unassigned. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Domestic Cold Water. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 6 In the left pane. if necessary. urinal. for System Type. 7 In the left pane.Overall.

Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. enter DCW 107. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. click Edit System. In the System Browser.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . Notice that the water main displays in blue. 19 On the System Tools panel. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 21 On the Edit System panel. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. For Flow Conversion Method. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. click Finish Editing System.

29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. as shown. enter 10'. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.2 7/8''. For Slope. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. for Offset. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar. right-click the top DCW connector. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. select Water. under Pipe Types. 34 In the plan view. 31 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Type Selector. enter 7''. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. enter 0”/12”. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 36 Move the cursor to the left. as shown. click to the left of the urinal. at the intersection of the water main pipe. select 3/4''. and click the connector. 30 In the plan view. and press Enter. 28 In the Type Selector. enter 3' . 33 Click Modify. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . For Offset.25 Using the same method. and click to place the pipe. connect the second toilet. select the sink above the urinal. enter 4'0”.

select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click OK. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 41 Select the top sink. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 40 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click to connect to the main cold water line.

add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.44 Using the same method. you create the hot water system.

4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.Design is open.Plumbing Plan . 2 In the Project Browser. 5 In the System Browser. 6 In the plan view. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select the 3 sinks. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .rvt. expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Overall. while pressing Ctrl. click Training Files.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog.6 Gallon. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. and click Edit System. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Tankless. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 12 In the Type Selector. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 15 In the System Browser. you edit the system to add equipment. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click OK. 10 In the System Browser. as shown. Default Domestic Cold Water. When designing systems. select 0. 13 In the plan view. 14 Click Modify. Default Domestic Hot Water. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. under Water Heater . Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for System Name. verify that DCW 107 is selected. In later steps. in the Unassigned folder. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.

enter 1' 6''. select the water heater. 19 Select the water heater. right-click the middle left connector. click Finish Editing System. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. enter 10’. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. Slope: 0''/12''. 25 On the Options Bar. and select Draw Pipe. 27 Click Modify. as shown. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 22 In the Type Selector. 26 Move the cursor to the right. Offset: 4' 6''. for Offset. and press Enter.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 23 On the Options Bar. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 24 Move the cursor up. and click the water main line. and on the Edit System panel. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

click Edit System. enter 1' 6''. and on the Placement Tools panel. select a sink. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1''. click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 36 Move the cursor down. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. as shown. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 9' 0''. 30 On the System Tools panel. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 35 On the Options Bar. select 4'-6''. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. for Offset. and in the System Selector. and for Offset. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 33 On the Edit System panel. and press Enter.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 37 On the Options Bar. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for Diameter. 38 Move the cursor to the right.

39 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink. for Offset. 42 Click Modify. and press Enter. enter 2' 8''. enter 1’. as shown. 41 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 40 On the Options Bar.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

You create a new pipe type. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. go to http://www. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this lesson. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.autodesk. 2 Right-click Standard. However. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can choose to save your work. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. and click Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After finishing each exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. click Training Files.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.rvt. In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. 267 . You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. If the tutorial training files are not present. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. For Offset.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. or architectural components. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. For System Type. and click Properties. click Rename. under Mechanical. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 9 Click OK. Next. select Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Wet. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. duct. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. For Pipe Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. In the left pane. structural beams. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. For System Type. In this exercise. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is specified. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you create project parameters and work with schedules. you modify the type properties of the pipe. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Carbon Steel. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 6 In the Project Browser. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. for Material. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. select Main. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. However.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 6 In the drawing area. right-click. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 5 Click OK twice.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Categories. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and click Element Properties. for Name.Design is highlighted. 8 Using a crossing window. select Spaces. click Add. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . select Fire Protection. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. the space crossing lines display. enter Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. For Group parameter under.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. select the upper half of the building. enter Zone 1.

for Sprinkler Zone. to which you add various parameters. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Fire Protection. including a calculated value parameter. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. under Fire Protection.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and click OK. and then access instance properties. you create schedules for sprinkler design. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. for Sprinkler Zone. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . verify that only Spaces are selected. enter Zone 2. and then click OK. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog.rvt. select Zone 1. 13 Using the same method.

and on the ribbon. For Key name. For Type of Parameter. for Name. 10 In the Format dialog. select Length. 6 Using the same method. enter Protection Area Construction Type. Click OK. For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 7 Click OK. enter 15. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Feet and fractional inches. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. click Add Parameter. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Light. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Design is highlighted. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. double-click on each column separator.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Fire Protection. Click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Select Schedule keys. indicating that it’s the active view. For Rounding. enter Maximum Spacing. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. The schedule displays. For Group parameter under. For Units. 11 Click OK twice. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. 9 On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Spaces. In the Maximum Spacing column. Obstructed-Combustible. 14 Select the new header. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. and click Field Format. select To the nearest 1'. click the Formatting tab.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan . select Maximum Spacing. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data.

For Name. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. under Available fields. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. select Spaces. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter 130. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. and press Enter. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Extra. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. enter Sprinkler Schedule.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Click OK. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary.

This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Level. and click OK. 22 Click OK twice. click Edit. select 0 decimal place. select Number. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Fields dialog. 20 On the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . For Type. select Sprinkler Zone. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select Header and Blank line. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. For Formula. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. for Sort by. For Then by. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. for Sorting/Grouping. select Area. For Rounding. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. click . select Fixed. For Discipline. Click OK. For Units. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Common.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Minimum Sprinklers. and click Field Format. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. under Other.

for Filter. select Number. For Fields. and then select Hidden field. and then click Field Format. and click View Properties. For Fields. right-click the schedule. select Sprinkler Zone. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 27 In the drawing area. and select Totals only. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Then by (second instance). select Level. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Grand totals. Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Hidden field. click Edit. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Level equals Level 2. select Minimum Sprinklers. ■ In the Format dialog. for Filter by. At the bottom of the dialog. 30 Click OK twice.

for Fields. On the Formatting tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. under Other. delete the word Maximum. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Calculate totals.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. click Edit. System Name. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Available fields. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Count. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. double-click Type. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and select Totals only. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. select Grand totals. Under Field formatting. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and Count. for Embedded Schedule. select Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click View Properties. For Category. select Sprinklers.

45 For Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. Unobstructed. 44 In the schedule. Unobstructed. 50 Access the instance properties. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. double-click FP . Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog.Fire Protection Plan Design. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 With the space still selected. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. under Identity Data. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 41 In the plan view. 52 Click OK. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select Ordinary. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 48 In the floor plan. select Ordinary. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select space 221 Instruction. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 43 Click Cancel. select Light. and the spacing parameter values are evident. As a result. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access the instance properties. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. but their values are not determined. for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. In the left pane of the Open dialog.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. As you place the sprinklers. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you can choose to save your work.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.autodesk. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. By following the recommended workflow. However. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. you will understand the process. and double-click Level 2 . At the end of this tutorial. After finishing each exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. methodology.rvt. As you create the system. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. 279 . Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. If the tutorial training files are not present. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.

When there is a small misalignment. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 3 In the Project Browser. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. After placing the initial sprinkler. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When this happens.

as shown.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Press Esc twice. 11 In the drawing area. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 9 In space Instruction 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . select the sprinklers that you placed. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. and click to place 3 sprinklers.Pendent . and select Sprinkler . 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.

and then press Esc. Next. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. verify that Constrain is cleared. Also. as shown. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.

Design. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. enter 11. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and 200C). click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 10' 6".Fire Protection Plan . Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down.FP_Ceiling view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you place non-hosted sprinklers. for Offset. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and press Enter. 200B. move the cursor to the right. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". specify a vertical offset. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 29 Press Esc. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 25 Click OK. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. under Constraints. Next. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This number is determined in the schedule. 19 In the floor plan. 18 Type WT. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the schedule updates. enter 14' 6". 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and click Element Properties. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. you adjust the offset. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. For Number. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. open Design ➤ FP .Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.

You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. After creating the logical connection. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the next exercise. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Fire Protection Plan . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Unlike logical connections (systems).rvt. and with piping (physical connection).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i.30 Close the file with or without saving it. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 1 In the Project Browser. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. click Training Files. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. However.

click View ➤ Systems. named Fire Protection Wet. within the Piping Systems folder. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. as shown. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. As you assign sprinklers to systems. In the System Browser. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 5 Right-click the header. and select Piping. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.

The Edit Piping System panel displays. providing system editing tools. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Settings. 11 With the system still selected. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and number of elements in the system. 13 In the System Browser. 15 In the drawing area. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . enter FP Wet_Zone2. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. select Branch. In the left pane. 19 Click OK. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. and a piping layout preview displays. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. for System Name. 12 On the Options Bar. For Pipe Type. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2.Wet is selected. select an initial piping layout. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. and click Select. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. indicating the logical connection. verify that 9' 0" is specified. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and select the system.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. system equipment. press Tab. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Next. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and on the Options Bar. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. For Offset. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. verify that Main is selected.

enter -12' 0". The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 23 For Offset. When the layout is finished. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 22 On the Options Bar. click Place Base. as shown. and select solution 5. In general.20 On the Generate Layout panel. click Solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. select 2". for Diameter. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and green represents branch lines). 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. verify that Network is selected.

29 Click Finish Layout. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. as shown. On the Generate Layout panel. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.

and then you create piping to physically connect them.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Either relocate the system components. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. or that offset elevations are incorrect. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 32 If necessary. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. the Connect Into tool. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Next. and various manual pipe creation tools.

4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Fire Protection Plan . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted.rvt. 2 Zoom in. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 If necessary. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser.

12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 13 Click Finish Layout. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. you can select the pipe or duct. 9 On the Edit System panel. click Add To System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . verify that Solutions is selected. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. click Finish Editing System. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). mechanical equipment. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 18 Click Finish Editing System. air terminals. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. radiators. 14 Close the System Browser. and select solution 5. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for Solution Type. 8 In the corridor. 5 In the drawing area. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. or a system component to display system tools. verify that Network is selected. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and pipe or duct is created. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system.

right-click. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select 9'. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan. and click Draw Pipe. 29 Using the same method. 25 Select the sprinkler. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and then tile the views. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 24 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 28 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 27 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 31 In the plan view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ 6 Press Esc. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.Fire Protection Plan .Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . double-click on the section head to open the section view. select 1/4" = 1'-0". you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 4 On the Options Bar. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Design is highlighted. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Training Files. for Scale.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

select 4".21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. 24 In the drawing area. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . select 1 1/4". The pipe diameter is modified. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and maximize the floor plan. as shown. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs).

Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this tutorial.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. For additional practice. you created a wet fire protection system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You added tags to pipes.

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. create details. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

under Floor Plans. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Copy of Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. right-click Level 1. dependent views. and click OK. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Rename. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. click Training Files. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. matchlines. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and click Properties. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and apply a view template. and view references. 307 .Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. If the view included detail graphics. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

rvt. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and click Rename. more focused. and click Apply Default View Template. and click OK. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 9 Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 4 Using the same method.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. create dependent views for areas B and C. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 6 In the Project Browser. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. as shown. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. views and put them on the sheet. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and then press Esc. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click OK. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale.

12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 19 In the drawing area. Click OK. 13 Press Esc twice. and then press Esc. select black. and click OK. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select 11. For Line Pattern. 14 Click Finish Matchline. For Line Weight. select Double Dash 5/8". for Target view. click the current value. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 20 Select the upper view reference and. 21 Using the same method. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . on the Options Bar. In the Color dialog./ ---). Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. and zoom to each of the view references. 25 Using the same method. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. as shown.

select Plumbing. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. For Default View Template. enter Plumbing Isometric . select Documentation. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Properties. for View Name. select Plumbing Isometric. for View Classification. For Sub-Discipline. right-click 3D Plumbing.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in. 4 In the Project Browser. The section crop lines no longer display. and select the section box. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. Under Graphics. Click OK.29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to select it. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Domestic Water. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Apply Default View Template. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

12 Using the same method. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. For Pattern. and click to select it.9 Right-click. select Dash. and then click OK. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". press Tab 3 times. select 3. Click Apply.

and click to select it. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). 14 Right-click.

press Tab 3 times. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sanitary Waste. click Reveal Hidden Elements.15 Press Esc. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements.Domestic Water view with detailing. In the drawing area. On the View Control Bar. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 18 Using methods learned previously. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and click to select it. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Right-click. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label.

When the view is associated with a sheet. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. click on the Format value. as shown. and then place the callout view on a sheet. verify that Common is selected. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Format dialog.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 21 Click OK twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. For Slope. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 25 Press Esc twice. and click to place the spot slope annotation. for Rounding. Creating Callout Views | 315 . select To the nearest 1/8".

6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). select 1/4"=1'-0''. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. click Training Files.rvt. for Scale. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.

■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Click OK. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. using the same method. for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 13 In the Project Browser.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. select 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Sheets (all). drag it to the sheet. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. double-click M601 . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. Creating Callout Views | 317 .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections.

and select the viewport. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for View Name. For Title on Sheet. right-click the callout view. Click OK. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and click Apply Default View Template. For Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 25 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. under Names. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Apply View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . right-click the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK.

■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. duct tags. 321 . ■ work with model-based components. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. symbols. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.

and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. click Training Files. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 8 With the text still selected. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). as shown. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.Creating Annotations In this exercise.

Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. a return diffuser. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. verify that Leader is cleared. Creating Annotations | 323 . and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice. 15 On the Options Bar. and then click Right Straight. as shown. 16 In the drawing area. select a supply diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a segment of round duct.

22 In the Tags dialog. If necessary. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 20 In the Tags dialog. for Ducts. and click Open. 17 Click Modify. 21 In the Load Family dialog. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click OK.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. under Category. 24 On the Options Bar. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rfa. click Load. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. clear Leader. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.

select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 32 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Creating Annotations | 325 . 26 On the Options Bar. Leader. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.25 In the drawing area. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and Attached End. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. as shown. select Horizontal.

33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. select Free End. for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown.

tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and lock lighting fixtures. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 37 In the drawing area. not simply an instance property. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Leader Arrowhead. Creating Dimensions | 327 . and all elements of that type are affected. 40 Using the method learned previously. lay out. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and click OK. That’s because you changed a type property. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. select the last tag placed. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.36 Press Esc twice. select Dot Open 1/16".

In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the Options Bar. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Press Esc. select the dimension line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. click Training Files. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. and then select the interior face of the wall. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.

the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and offset them 8' from the wall. 16 Press Esc. enter 8'. 19 Using the same methods. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Because the dimensions are locked. and press Enter. Creating a Legend | 329 .13 Using the same method.3 1/2"). 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. linework. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . and notes. annotation symbols. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.

Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . enter Diffuser Legend. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.8 Neck.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. For Scale. Click OK. click Training Files. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. For View. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click below the title to place the diffuser. 5 Click in the drawing area. select 1/4" = 1' -0". select Floor Plan. ■ 9 In the drawing area.

click next to the top diffuser. Creating a Legend | 331 . 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 14 In the drawing area.11 Press Esc. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 21 Press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then press Esc.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.DROP and its text note. 24 Select the component’s break line. 26 Press Esc. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.

38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . 34 Using the method learned previously. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. Creating a Legend | 333 . 35 Change the text on the right to N.MECHANICAL LEGEND. and then click Modify. enter E. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc.39 With the viewport still selected. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.rvt.113 East elevation view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 335 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. A detail callout that references another view.Detailing 15 In this lesson. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and text. indicating that it’s the active view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. detail groups. click Training Files. A drafting view using detail components.

Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Next. 4 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. and then modify and align the views. 7 Drag the Power Riser .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select each of the 2 panelboards. 5 In the drawing area. and click to place it. clear Leader. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 8 Using the same method.113 East on the sheet. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. place Power Riser .

and click Deactivate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line. right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. select the 113 North view. and click OK. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. for Title on Sheet. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 .9 Press Esc. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 13 Right-click. giving the appearance of a single view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Activate View. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select the 113 East elevation view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. In the next exercise. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. right-click. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. as shown. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Activate View. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 22 Press Esc. 21 Using the drag control. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.

Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click OK. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. In the Line Styles dialog. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Under Modify Subcategories. 8 On the Options Bar. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. for Line Weight.113 North view. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Chain is selected. notice that there are no snaps active. for Name. 9 Beginning at the transformer. click Training Files. expand Lines. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 2 Close the Project Browser.rvt. select 6. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . As you draw. enter Electrical Power. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. click New. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . In the New Subcategory dialog. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .

10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter 1/8". 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. as shown.

so that the result is as shown. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 29 Click Modify. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 28 Click above the cap. as shown.

34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple. 33 On the Options Bar. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. You enter exact values for each line length. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. enter 3/32". Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .36 Press Esc. for Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. enter 0 0. 42 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 40 Press Esc.5.

44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. while pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc. Press Esc. 46 In the Project Browser. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select all 3 lines. enter Ground. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. Using the same method. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and press Enter. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. enter 0 0. you can ensure that they stay together. for Name. and click OK. 50 With the group selected. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.125. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.25. click on the length dimension value. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 47 In the drawing area.

TP-2B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 52 Select the detail group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.51 Using the method learned previously. 54 Select the group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.

you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. and will place it on sheet E01. click Training Files. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 2 Right-click the copy. and click Rename.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). for Name.rvt. In later exercises.

and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 7 On the ViewCube. and then click the corner where the Top. and Left sides converge. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and then press Esc. click Home.6 Select the section box. Back.

select 3D Views. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Under Names. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Click OK. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Walkthroughs. and click Apply View Template. right-click. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select 3D HVAC Iso. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

(Right). Move the cursor down and to the left.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 15 Using the same method. and click to specify the second leader point. Typical. 19 Complete the text labels. as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown.

24 Access the instance properties for the view. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 25 Click OK. select Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and then click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.To rotate and reposition a text label. and under Extents. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 23 Click on the crop region. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.

Use detail lines to create a detail group. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and click Properties. right-click the view name. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select the isometric view.rvt. For Scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select 3" = 1'-0". 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. click Training Files. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.29 In the drawing area. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Click OK. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view.

14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". as the rectangle start point. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Plumbing. select Documentation. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. For View Classification.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click the point at the top of the drain. 13 In the drawing area. for Sub-Discipline. Click OK. as shown. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 9 Zoom in to the component. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 On the Element panel.

(Line). 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 22 Click Modify. and click OK.P.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Concrete. 23 In the drawing area.I. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. select the filled region. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 18 With the filled region still selected. for Type. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. select C. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 20 Select 1.

29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then click to select them. select Multiple. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew.28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 40 Click Finish Region. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. (Rectangle). draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. and then press Esc. as shown. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 45 Using the method learned previously. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.

54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. select the Flashing Membrane group.D. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. as shown. 49 Click Modify. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw wide detail lines as shown. and click OK. for Name. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain. enter Flashing Membrane_F. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.

add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 61 Using the same method.55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.

select Leader and Free End.62 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. and then click OK. 67 On the Options Bar. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 64 Press Esc twice. as shown. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 71 Click Modify. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 72 If necessary.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 80 Press Esc twice. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 76 To select the leader start point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. 78 Move the cursor to the left.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

select the view title.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and click to place it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc twice. 88 In the drawing area. 90 Press Esc. open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. you import a CAD detail drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view.rvt. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. For A-----NPP. For Colors. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select Visible. select Auto-Detect. Click Open. For Layers. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. select 3.dwg. select Black and White. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Import units. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. for Line Weight. click Training Files.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK.

and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.8 Type ZF. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. open P103 . 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 11 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc. 12 In the drawing area. select the viewport title.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful